JP7019956B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a ball entry switching means that can switch between a state in which the ball can be guided to the entry port and a state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entry port (Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-181572

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in switching the state of the ball entry switching means .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the switching of the state of the ball entry switching means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a gaming area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which a ball flowing down the gaming area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry opening. A ball entry switching means that can switch between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port cannot be guided to the entry port, and the entry port. A game machine including a detection means for detecting a ball that has entered the ball into the space, which constitutes a predetermined space in which up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entry port can exist at the same time, and the ball entry switching. The ball is provided with a discharging means capable of discharging a ball existing in the predetermined space from the predetermined space in a state where the means is switched to the second state, and the ball enters in a state where the ball exists in the predetermined space. The switching means is configured to be switchable to the first state, the game ball existing in the predetermined space is configured to be visible, and the detecting means is a means for imparting a predetermined value, and is a front . All the balls that have passed through the entry ball opening and flowed down the predetermined space are configured to be detectable after the flow down of the predetermined space, and in the game machine, all the balls that have passed through the entry ball opening are placed in the predetermined space. It is configured to enter the ball, and is configured to eject all the balls that have passed through the entry port from the predetermined space.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the switching of the state of the ball entry switching means .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in line XII-XII of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in line XII-XII of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in XIX-XIX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is a first. It is a rear view of the variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in the XXIb-XXIb line of FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first. It is a rear view of the variable winning apparatus, (d) is the sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the XXId-XXId line of FIG. 21C. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. FIG. 25 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27 (c). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the big hit type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and the first specific winning opening in the fifth operation pattern. 2 It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a specific winning opening. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. 31. It is a rear perspective view of the lining front plate. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 31. (A) and (b) are a partial front view of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first variable winning device in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the flow mode of the sphere reaching the first variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the big hit type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area in the tenth operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of a game board. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. 45. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the big hit type in the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening in the eleventh operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and the first specific winning opening in the twelfth operation pattern. 2 It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of a specific winning opening. It is a partial front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. It is a partial sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus in the LII-LII line of FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the thirteenth operation pattern, and (b) is the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the change. It is a back perspective view of the lining front plate in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of the 1st variable winning apparatus. FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 1000, a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally opens the entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probabilistic state of the special symbol). For example, it is determined to be a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the ball is performed for the ball entering the second ball opening 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or 10 balls are won. The released operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual.

There are six types of special symbols, "Big hit A", "Big hit B", "Big hit C", "Big hit a", "Big hit b", and "Big hit c" (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and is configured to change the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when it hits a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and as a result, a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the big hit, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 is not limited to, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), the normal symbol time is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of times of lottery for the special symbol in which the above-mentioned normal symbol is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent big hit increases as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

Further, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) is a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entry port 640. Further, the normal state means a state of the game in which neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is reached. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased from the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left side of the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entry port 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, and jackpot c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and a ball of a normal entry port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is displayed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily released when the special symbol is probablely changed or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 Compared to the case where a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball, the jackpot (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in the probable change state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed strike. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probable change state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right, which is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probable change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player can perform the probabilistic change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of being in the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed strike even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be launched (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in a normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, if a right-handed strike is performed in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the ball is launched aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed strike. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). Further, the clerk in the hall can also easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of performing right-handed in a normal state by confirming the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen.

As a method of determining whether or not a player is hitting right, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball has been hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right It may be configured to display a hit warning image. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), a signal indicating that the hall computer is fraudulent is sent. It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, the case where a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected even though it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Call the gate error staff" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, during the probable change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the open state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can be easily won in the second entry port 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball that flows down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and at the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the electric motor is used. The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. It becomes easier to display the symbol of "○" on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. be. However, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit A, big hit a) where the maximum profit (outgoing ball) is obtained as the type of big hit selected in the case of a big hit is when the ball wins in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Toward, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is launched toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. Will be.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 1000 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entry port 64 (lower left side of the second ball entry port 640), and the first specific one is opened in the substantially central portion thereof in the left-right direction. A winning opening (large open opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery caused by winning a prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). (15) prize balls will be paid out based on the prize of one ball.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating ascending, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. I have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening / closing plate 1300 ascending and rotating to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Operates to repeat alternately.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 1000a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. do.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is input / output. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 enters the second entrance 640 among the balls flowing down to the right of the variable front time device unit 80 by the player hitting right with the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof. Almost all of the spheres that flowed downstream without spheres are guided to the flow path forming portion.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, an lining front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the lining front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation, and a power transmission member thereof. The drive device 1500 that drives the 1400, the regulation member 1600 that regulates the discharge of the ball in conjunction with the opening / closing plate 1300, and the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 are laid on the main body member 1100 from the back side. The rear cover 1700, which is fastened and fixed in such a manner, is mainly provided.

The main body member 1100 has a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A ball flows down on the front side of the accommodating portion 1120 which is accommodated and partially penetrated, the holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the accommodating portion 1120 when viewed from the front, and the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A protrusion 1140 projecting along the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging balls from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 to support the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 that is projected in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulation member 1600 at the upper portion of the discharge port 1150.

The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and the rectangle thereof. A through hole formed through a rectangular shape in a straight line and perpendicular posture connecting a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 that operates along the right end of the recess 1122 to the front and back of the thin plate member 1110. Mainly equipped with 1123.

The support recess 1121 is formed to have a width slightly larger than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and in the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the lining front plate 1200. To. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the lining front plate 1200.

The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the recessing depth thereof is slightly deeper than that of the plate portion 1310. As a result, the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122 in the tilted posture (closed state) of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The projecting portion 1140 is projected to a position where it abuts on a ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200. The flowing sphere is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion 1140. A similar projecting portion 1235 is also arranged in the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200 at a position where it does not overlap with the projecting portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a protrusion height that is evenly projected toward the back surface side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular shape or an arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. A circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib is mainly provided.

The circular rib 1162 maintains a distance between the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotation tip portion 1421.

The lining front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 at a predetermined distance, and a side wall portion extending from the left end portion of the thin plate member 1210 to the back side. 1220, a box-shaped accommodating portion 1230 extending toward the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and an upper end portion of the accommodating portion 1230. The detection sensor 1240 and the like are mainly provided.

The thin plate member 1210, the front right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220, the front view left side wall portion of the accommodating portion 1230, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which the sphere flows down in the vertical direction. The part is composed.

The accommodating portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in front view, and is projected toward the back side in a storage flow path 1231 having a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside and a middle portion of the storage flow path 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side of the front view.

The storage flow path 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere can pass through. Form a flow path. In this embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage flow path 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231.

The storage flow path 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and a rolling motion that rolls the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. It mainly comprises a surface 1231b.

The tilt angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the tilt angle of the front side (right side of FIG. 12) portion of the storage flow path 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

The protrusion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protrusion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the ball flowing down the storage flow path 1231, and the ball is decelerated by coming into contact with the ball.

The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left side of the front view. As a result, the ball landing on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled to the left and guided to the flow path forming portion.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passing and the number of winnings is counted.

The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped downward without contacting the ball, depending on the difference in posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. A pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting along the longitudinal direction from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side of the front view. It mainly includes a load-bearing portion 1330 to be provided.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the ascending posture (open state), and is covered in the ascending posture (open state) in which the length in the lateral direction is along the front-back direction in the lateral direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the detection sensor 1240.

Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 chamfered in a cross-sectional arc shape at the upper corner portion of the opposite end portion of the shaft portion 1320 in the ascending posture (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission unit 1332 extending to the back surface side of the rolling surface 1311, and an intervening transmission unit thereof. It mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 projecting from the 1332 on the right side when viewed from the rear (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is arranged).

The engaging portion 1333 is extended to a position where it interferes with the operation locus of the power transmission member 1400, and has a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corner portion, contacts the power transmission member 1400, so that stress concentration at the time of contact between the engaging portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. ..

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extension portion 1420 extending in the axial direction from the main body portion 1410.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

The protrusion pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 operates linearly due to switching of excitation of the drive device 1500, the protrusion pin 1412 is displaced and power is transmitted. The member 1400 rotates.

The extension portion 1420 includes a rotation tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extension tip portion, and a push-in portion 1422 projecting from the rotation tip portion 1421 to the front side. To prepare for.

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H-shaped (a shape having recesses at the top and bottom) tip member 1520 disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly prepared.

The tip member 1520 is configured such that the concave portion on the upper side thereof can accommodate the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protrusion pin 1412 inside while the power transmission member 1400 is rotating (see FIG. 20).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extending portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 having a thickness larger than that of the extending portion 1620.

The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmission unit 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission unit 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the ascending posture (open state).

The ball receiving portion 1630 is in a tilted posture (a posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is arranged at a lower position, a storage state) and overlaps with the discharge port 1150 (the ball discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150). It is formed in a mode that is narrowed to the extent that it is not.

The regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction of maintaining an ascending posture (a posture in which the end opposite to the shaft portion 1610 is arranged at an upper position, a discharging state).

The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710, which is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in the IX-IX line of FIG. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 is covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be aligned with the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 are arranged side by side at intervals through which spheres can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 of the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 are arranged in the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. By guiding the sphere between them, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and an irregular prize (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball hit by a nail or the like is thrown laterally and the detection sensor is used. (Passing through 1240) can be prevented.

Although the details will be described later, since the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 1231.

The open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the XI-XI line of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 10 and 11, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 from falling.

The ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 is rolled from the right end thereof. And enters the storage flow path 1231.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is left between the plate portion 1310 and the lining front plate 1200. Therefore, the required material can be reduced and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced as compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes into contact with the lining front plate 1200.

Further, by reducing the diameter of the movement locus of the tip of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the lateral direction, it is easy to prevent the ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 from interfering with the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

Here, although the details will be described later, since the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state in the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 and the spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 are in the storage flow path. Is stored in. Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When 10 balls are stored in the storage device 1231, the 10th ball stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a plug, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In the present embodiment, when the 10th ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, and the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, as the opening / closing plate 1300 operates, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state, so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the spheres are not discharged from the storage flow path 1231, the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but stays at a position where it does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. do.

When the 10th ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but during the switching, the 10th ball is stored and flowed while receiving a load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331. It is pushed into the road 1231 (see FIG. 21 (b)). That is, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a manner of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is switching to the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 is the tenth. Because the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while in contact with the ball (rubbing), the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates are different. It is possible to prevent the moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened, and it is possible to prevent the eleventh ball from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is not necessary to set a limit on the period from the detection of the specified number of spheres by the detection sensor 1240 to the change of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state, and the spheres can be arbitrarily set. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started 1 second after the detection. In this embodiment, wait until the 10th ball comes into contact with the 9th ball (after the center of the ball is arranged on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention unit 1331). ) In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, the opening / closing plate 1300 is controlled to open / close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

According to the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening / closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In this embodiment, prevention (delay) of ball entry can be performed only on the eleventh ball. That is, in the first to tenth balls, it is possible to pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special gaming state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole sphere.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position to delay the winning of the subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, but the first ball. Since each of the 10th spheres is partially connected and decelerates when rolling on the rolling surface 1311, the time until the 10th sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was delayed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the configuration for decelerating the 1st to 10th balls is not adopted, and only the 11th ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240, so that the 1st to 10th balls are Even if the balls flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can pass through the ball at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

In addition, even if most of the period in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened due to repairs such as jamming has passed and the game is started at the end of the period, there is no ball entering the detection sensor 1240. Since it does not slow down in a meaningful way, more balls can be entered.

Further, regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast it flows toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts tilting operation), regardless of the speed. , The 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage flow path 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in the XII-XII line of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is shown.

Here, a mechanism in which the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 are arranged in the same manner each time will be described. First, the ball P1 that first entered the empty storage flow path 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a that inclines backward at the lowermost portion of the storage flow path 1231, and is arranged at a position where it abuts on the front surface of the regulation member 1600. To.

The sphere P1 is weighted by the subsequent sphere P2 reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom in arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, depending on how the pachinko machine 10 is tilted in the front-rear direction, it may be closer to the lining front plate 1200 side or to the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, since the projecting portion 1140 is arranged at a position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 abuts on the sphere P2, the sphere P2 is a main body member in a state of being in contact with the sphere P1. It does not come into contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

The sphere P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered sphere P3 abuts on the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the lining front plate 1200 has the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235 on the right side of the projecting portion 1235 regardless of the position of the ball P2 in the front-rear direction. The sphere P3 is arranged at a position where it is impossible for the sphere P3 to enter between the sphere P3 and abut on the thin plate member 1210 of the concealed front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the sphere P2 is kept small).

Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side of FIG. 12). ) Will come into contact. Therefore, the load of the sphere P3 causes the sphere P2 to move toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12). As a result, the sphere P2 settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

After that, the sphere P3 is loaded from the subsequently entering sphere P4 under almost the same conditions as the condition in which the sphere P2 is loaded from the sphere P3 (except that the front-back direction is reversed), thereby causing the sphere P3. Settles in the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

That is, the arrangement of the nth ball entering the storage flow path 1231 is fixed to a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres is not fixed by narrowing the storage flow path 1231, but the cross-sectional area of the storage flow path 1231 is maintained larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the projecting portion 1140, It is realized by arranging 1235. As a result, it is possible to fix the arrangement of the stored balls to a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the spheres are stored in a fixed arrangement each time the action of storing the spheres occurs in the storage flow path 1231. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of stored items each time.

With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 will be described. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 in line XII-XII of FIG. In FIG. 13A, the sphere P1 is ejected and the sphere P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the sphere P2 is ejected and the sphere P3 is the position of the sphere P2 in FIG. The state of being arranged in is illustrated.

As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulation member 1600 is discharged and the ball is discharged from the storage flow path 1231. When ejecting the ball. The sphere arranged at the lowermost end (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected in order.

Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extension portion (flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage flow path 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane, the flow velocity of the sphere P1 is increased. Since the flow velocity of the sphere P2 is higher than that of the sphere P2, a gap is formed between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the sphere P2 to the sphere P1 at the time of discharging the sphere P1 can be minimized, the speed at the time of discharging the sphere P1 is uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P1. Can be transformed into.

After the sphere P1 is discharged, the subsequent spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extended portion of the storage flow path 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 abut on the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are turned toward the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction component, pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, and decelerate.

In other words, the spheres P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extension direction of the storage flow path 1231 by abutting on the projecting portions 1140 and 1235, and the previously stored spheres are stopped. It will be relocated to the position where it was, and will decelerate.

As a result, a gap is created between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is ejected can be minimized. , The speed at the time of ejection of the sphere P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored after the sphere P2.

That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, as the number of stored spheres increases, the way of accelerating the following spheres due to gravity changes, and the discharge mode of the spheres P2 (speed at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like) may change, but the change in the discharge mode can be seen in the action of the above-mentioned protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and its subsequent ones). It can be suppressed by the action of leaving a gap between the ball and the ball and eliminating the load due to gravity).

After that, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13 (a) to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13 (b), so that the spheres are discharged from the storage flow path 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball ejected by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the ejected ball is ejected without receiving the weight of the succeeding ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the discharge mode (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 can make the ejection mode (speed at the time of ejection, ejection interval, etc.) uniform. In the present embodiment, it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or longer, all the maximum number (10) balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of 1000. It should be noted that in FIGS. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in the non-excited state, and the rotary tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300. They are placed apart.

Since the intervention transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and separated from the regulation member 1600, the regulation member 1600 is not loaded from the intervention transmission portion 1332, and the regulation member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the discharged state by the urging force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects so that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or less than the projected area of the ball. This makes it possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of 1000. It should be noted that in FIGS. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state, and the rotary tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise to form the opening / closing plate 1300. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

The intervening transmission unit 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates. Is switched to a tilted posture (regulatory member 1600 is switched to a stored state).

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 1600 is given a load due to the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and an urging force of a torsion spring (not shown). A structure is adopted that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state while maintaining a large value. The large urging force of the torsion spring leads to the effect that the regulating member 1600 can be immediately switched to the discharge state, whereby the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. When switched to, the power transmission member 1400 is pushed outward along the rotation axis direction of the operation locus E1. The operation locus E1 is shown as an outer shape of the movement locus of the portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmitting member 1400, but the surface forming the rotation direction thereof. It is hung in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 tends to push the opening / closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but no matter how large the urging force is, this urging force is the power. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

As a result, once the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, after exciting the solenoid 1510 so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage was lowered. Even so, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in an open state.

Therefore, even if a variable load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

As the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the sphere lands, it is loaded by the weight of the sphere, and the number of the spheres changes frequently. The 1300 is given a fluctuating load. Further, for example, the regulation member 1600 is loaded with or without a sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage flow path 1231. And, a fluctuating load is given.

As described above in FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while the opening / closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state. Therefore, even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it physically prevents more spheres (10 or more spheres in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 from passing through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulently maintaining the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state and increasing the number of prize balls to be acquired.

20 and 21 show the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 in the XXb-XXb line of FIG. 20 (a). 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a rear view of FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, FIG. 21 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning apparatus 1000, and FIG. 21 (d) is an XXId of FIG. 21 (c). -It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning apparatus 1000 in the XXId line.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, only the opening / closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. The illustration of the other configurations is omitted, and the state of the opening / closing plate 1300 changing from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated by the first distance h1 from the reference line O1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) is 20 (c), FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b) show a state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1. In), the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member is arranged. The states in which the 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) are shown in the drawings.

In FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line as a reference, and the outer shape of the cross section of the sphere in the same cross section as the cross section used in the illustration is illustrated by the imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b) without interfering with the sphere.

From the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 20 (c), the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. In addition, in FIG. 20C, the rotary tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 come into contact with each other.

As a result, the power transmission member 1400 can be given momentum before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, while the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state are obtained. It is considered to be an intermediate state between them (see FIG. 21 (b)).

In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 projects to the front side and the ball flows down to the front side (right side of FIG. 21B) of the opening / closing plate 1300. , The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21 (b)), but the tip member 1520 moves to the right in the rear view (to the right in FIG. 21 (a)) to transmit power. Since the load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing plate 1310 from rotating due to the weight of the sphere.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing downward through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 while allowing the ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. ..

As a result, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required for discharging the ball from the storage flow path 1231 and the problem of shortening the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 (shortening the interval) contradicting the problem. In the state shown in FIG. 21A, the plate portion 1310 is extended to an intermediate position while the ball is continuously discharged, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the lining front plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the opening / closing plate 1300 is in a posture of preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 It is possible to prevent the ball on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharged state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000. ..

As shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time as the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the stored state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be shared with the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

20 and 21 have described the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state, but when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it can be grasped by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21 (d) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21 (b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operating direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulation member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the opening / closing plate 1300 operates, it is impossible to maintain the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state after the regulation member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be done. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular prize in which the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be ejected.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still opened and the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. , In this embodiment, it can be made impossible.

That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the process of being opened to closed, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves up, so that the rolling surface 1311 is used. When the spheres come into contact with each other, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 that works in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the spheres. Therefore, when the sphere comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves downward due to the weight of the sphere, so that the sphere cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. This makes it possible to prevent irregular prizes from occurring.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the start winning prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot A is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 49", the jackpot B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 22 (b)).

When the jackpot B is obtained, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1200 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot C is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 22 (b)).

When the jackpot C is obtained, the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the first variable winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern in any case. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launch of the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot a is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000, as in the case of the jackpot A. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the jackpot b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot b is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the big hit game exceeds the case of the big hit a.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the jackpot c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 22 (b)).

When the jackpot c is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the big hit game exceeds the case of the big hit a, and the prize is paid out for each round. The time required for a ball or jackpot game fluctuates.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, while the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while making a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be lengthened as compared with the case where the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when a jackpot (big hit b and jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing of launching the ball aiming at the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency) that the player can obtain by the jackpot game due to the difference in the jackpot type can be obtained. It is possible to make a difference in the number of payouts including).

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) includes a jackpot (big hit a) that allows you to receive a large amount of payouts in a time-efficient manner and payouts inefficiently. It is possible to provide a small number of big hits (big hit b, big hit c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the big hit a is obtained. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) when playing a game continuously for a predetermined time while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that can increase the difference).

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, and it becomes easy for the special symbol 2 to be drawn. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (big hit of the maximum ball) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. As it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22 (c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5 to 28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23A is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23B is a diagram showing the timekeeping of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change, and FIG. 23C is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning opening 1000a in the 3rd operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets a solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged globally. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored balls. Will be done. Therefore, it takes 2 seconds to eject 10 balls.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

In the first operation pattern, the ejection of the ball in the first interval time Int1 between rounds can form a state in which the ball does not remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round. Therefore, even after the second round, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round can be reached. The round game R can be completed without waiting for (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be advanced quickly.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets a solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the balls are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored balls. Will be done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is 5, for example, when 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. , Five spheres will still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

In the second operation pattern, the ejection of the ball in the second interval time Int2 between rounds can form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R in each round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the fifteenth round is repeated with the second interval time Int2 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds.

First, when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only 5 balls can be won in the round game R of the second and subsequent rounds.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes more than three times as long as in the case of performing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern, while the payout ball is about half, and the time efficiency of acquiring the ball is efficient. Becomes dramatically worse.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a, improve the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve the interest in the jackpot game.

The second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various numerical values can be set and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to.

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, since only two balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231, for example, the balls are discharged to the storage flow path 1231 in the previous round. When 10 balls are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the number of payouts is small (30).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, 7 balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, for example, 10 balls are discharged from the storage flow path 1231 in the previous round. If the pieces are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) can be paid out.

It is also possible to set the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R immediately after, and 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a large number (150) prizes are awarded. It is possible to hope that the ball and the progress time of the round game R will be shortened.

<When operating with the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets a solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive is controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

Since the discharge of balls in the first interval time Int1 between rounds forms a state in which no balls remain inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the second round game R, the specified number of balls are formed even after the second round. (In this embodiment, 10) pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the balls can be paid out for that amount, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be paid out. The round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize ball can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the tenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the 10th round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the 11th round round game R is started.

In the 11th round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the 11th round round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eleventh round ends.

After that, similarly, the 12th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By ejecting the ball in the second interval time Int2 between the rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R after the 11th round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a state may occur in which a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is also smaller than that by the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than that of the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 pieces = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15 pieces), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is determined. , It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on the number of rounds of the round game.

In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the end of the game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may increase toward the end of the game, or the number of payouts may peak in the middle round.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the number of rounds in which the round game R is performed, thereby giving the jackpot game slowness and speed and improving the player's interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player is expected to pay out in the first operation pattern because there is no change from the first operation pattern until the tenth round round game R. You can play big hit games with the expectation that you can get the number.

Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in 1 second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in one jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second interval between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. The interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds for odd-numbered rounds and 1.0 seconds for even-numbered rounds, and the like can be set in advance.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the 11th round, the number of balls finally paid out can be unpredictable until the jackpot game is completed, and the attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the degree of payout may be made to correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when a jackpot game is performed with the third operation pattern, the figure of the running character is displayed on the LCD screen, and the beginning (the first round) where the stamina of the character remains is displayed. The character to be run runs well, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina runs out (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls also decreases.

In this way, by associating the degree of payout of prize balls with the effect displayed on the LCD screen, it is possible for the player to easily embrace emotions in the LCD effect, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is improved. be able to.

Further, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be predetermined. It can take more time than the production time. In other words, for example, the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a is performed at an unexpectedly high speed, so that the ball is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the big hit game. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending in the middle of the first playback of the moving image that is loop-played over a predetermined production time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the effect during the jackpot is fully viewed.

The effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen when the jackpot game is performed with the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "Do your best next time") is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display the cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without stressing the player.

On the other hand, it may be displayed as a mode in which the player is more stressed. For example, a case where a character running during a jackpot game is displayed and the character is displayed to take a break in a break area in an interval between rounds will be described. In the first operation pattern, every time a specified number of balls are won, the interval between rounds is set, so that the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of prizes cannot be won and the interval between rounds cannot be reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited. Therefore, it is possible to perform the effect of accumulating fatigue without causing a deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short in the first place, the character can be used. It is possible to produce that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, so that the player's aspiration to recover at the next big hit can be enhanced.

Further, in the case of performing the same display, the character may replenish the water at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently replenish water, the number of times of replenishing water (number of winnings) is the first in the 11th and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern. Compared to the operation pattern, it will be less and the character will run for a longer period (the period of the jackpot game), so the amount of water that can be replenished will be insufficient compared to the sweat that comes out of the character, and the character will become more and more tired. It is possible to perform the effect without causing a deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to match the appearance of the character with the profit that the player can obtain (payout ball including time efficiency), and how much the jackpot the player has won (whether it is a middle hit). , Whether it is a big hit or a super big hit) can be easily grasped by the player through the production of the whole big hit game.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described, but the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment has balls that can be stored inside. It is configured so that the number of can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, when a ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the arrangement of the ball stored in the second storage flow path 2251 are shown by hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and is a main body member slightly different from the first embodiment. It is equipped with a 2100, an lining front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600 and a rear cover (not shown), and further includes a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable layer entry device 2800 includes a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball, which is a reference for payout, passes during a jackpot game.

The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a, which is normally closed, has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until the ball is won or 10 balls are won. Although the details will be described later, the open operation is possible with a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

The main body member 2100 is in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotary support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is also a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and is configured to be able to insert the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of drive guide ribs 2183 in which a pair of wall portions are arranged in parallel along the plane direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extend linearly in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs 2183 along the plane direction of the thin plate member 1110. It mainly includes a transmission guide rib 2184 in which the wall portions are arranged in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 2185 that pivotally supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 arranged in the lining front plate 2200 is inserted.

Each rib 2183, 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked with each other when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

The lining front plate 2200 is connected in the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, housing portion 1230 and detection sensor 1240) provided in the lining front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second accommodating unit 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back surface side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has a second end connected to the middle of the storage flow path 1231. The second detection is arranged in the second storage flow path 2251 in a posture in which the opening is along the extension direction of the second storage flow path 2251 near the upper end portion of the storage flow path 2251 and the second storage flow path 2251. The sensor 2255 and the left side portion of the opening of the second storage flow path 2251 are closed between the front plate of the second accommodating portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. Mainly includes an inclined surface 2257 and the like.

The second storage flow path 2251 passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and when the spheres are accommodated inside the second accommodating portion 2250, when the discharge port 1150 is blocked and the spheres are accumulated, the number of stored spheres is increased. It is configured to have a maximum of 14.

The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device having a second specific winning opening 2255a and having the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the accommodating portion 1230 by switching the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball enters the accommodating portion 2250 by switching the second variable winning device 2800. When entering the ball in 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged. Therefore, all the balls that were blocked by the slide plate 2840 and did not enter the second storage flow path 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are configured to face the flow path forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. To. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. If it is in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by playing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an inexperienced player can easily play the game.

The second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow path 2251 with a margin for arranging one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing when the remaining one ball passes through the second detection sensor 2255 to reach the specified number), a plurality of balls flow into the second storage flow path 2251 in a row. , The structure is such that more than the specified number of balls can enter.

In the regulating member 2600, in addition to the configuration (shaft portion 1610, extension portion 1620 and ball receiving portion 1630) provided in the regulation member 1600 of the first embodiment, the shaft portion 1610 is further extended to the left, and the extension portion 1620 is provided. A second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 in the plane direction of the above is provided.

As will be described later, the second extension portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load during the operation of the second variable winning device 2800. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 can be the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening / closing plate 1300 regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening / closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

The second variable winning device 2800 has a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a middle abdomen while being supported at one end by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and projecting from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip thereof. One end is fixed to the member 2820, and the rod-shaped intervening rod portion 2850 is slidably arranged inside the drive guide rib 2183, and one end is arranged at a position where the intervening rod portion 2850 can be brought into contact with the transmission guide rib. It mainly comprises a transmission rod portion 2860 extending along the inside of 2184 and having the other end arranged at a position capable of contacting the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183, while the movement in the up-down direction and the front-back direction is restricted. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured to be closer to each other (narrow the distance from each other) as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 increases, so that the intervening rod portion 2850 is configured. Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, while the movement in the left-right direction and the front-back direction is restricted. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other (narrow the distance from each other) as the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 increases, so that the transmission rod portion 2860 is configured. Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The surfaces of the end portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 in contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. As a result, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 on the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. 25. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is configured to have an arcuate cross-sectional shape in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the facing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained in the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for making the ball capable of entering the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

In FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulation member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the configuration unnecessary for explanation is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. The state of doing is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 27 (a), the solenoid 2810 is de-energized and the tip member 2820 is arranged at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27 (b), the solenoid 2810 is immediately after being excited. In FIG. 27 (c), the tip member 2820 is placed in the middle position of the movement range, but in FIG. 27 (c), the tip member 2820 is placed in the state where the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each of the states is illustrated. In the state shown in FIG. 27 (a), the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state in which the ball is prevented from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27 (c), the slide plate 2840 is , Configure an open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), when the slide plate 2840 is closed, the regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is not excited, it is possible to prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the stored state due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode (maintaining in non-excitation) that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Therefore, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

Further, when the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 or the second storage flow path 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a).

As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to start displacement via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 to start displacement via the intervening rod portion 2850. do. Here, in the present embodiment, the abutting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are slightly separated from each other in the state of FIG. 27A, but are arranged close to each other, so that the operation and transmission of the slide plate 2840 are performed. The operation of the rod portion 2860 is started almost at the same time.

When the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed downward and displaced by the end portion of the intervening rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 gives a load in the pushing direction to the second extension portion 2640 of the regulation member 2600. As a result, the regulation member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and the state is in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the tip member 2830 is completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the terminal position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulation member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the intervening rod portion 2850 slides to the extent that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860, whereby the intervening member 2850 is moved from the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied to the intervening member 2850 can be flowed in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the intervening member 2850.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the intervening member 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the intervening member 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. It is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 from fluctuating via the restricting member 2600, and thus drive the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820, in an open state. It is possible to prevent the force from fluctuating. As a result, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the slide direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulation member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810. As a result, it is possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the regulating member 2600, so that it is possible to prevent the control value of the number of discharged pieces specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game from deviating from the actual number of discharged pieces. It is possible to stabilize the number of discharged pieces.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27 (c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent line of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the restricting member 2600 is angled with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27 (c)) to the closed state (see FIG. 27 (a)) and the regulation by the intervening rod portion 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. The transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained in the standby position (see FIG. 27 (a)).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the present embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot. It is stipulated in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64) is Since it is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the description is omitted. In the following, the case where the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) is a big hit in the present embodiment is performed. explain.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot d is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls plus a limited increase.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 99", the jackpot e is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot e is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 2250 prize balls plus a limited increase, but the difficulty of increasing the number of payouts is higher than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing of increasing the number of payouts, the time required for the jackpot game is significantly longer than that of the jackpot d.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, while the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while making a difference in the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R in the 1st to 7th rounds). When a specified number of balls or more are entered into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout amount is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (8th round round game R) and the progress of the 8th round is started. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can acquire the increased amount of balls paid out by inserting the specified number or more balls into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit including time efficiency is limited to the specified number of prizes up to the 8th round, and the round game R after the 9th round. The aim is to increase the number of payouts with the aim of winning more than the specified number. Therefore, depending on the number of rounds of the round game R, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put more than a specified number of balls in the first variable winning device 2000, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing a time change in the fifth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the 4th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means causes the solenoids 1510 and 2810 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second round. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the second specific winning opening 2255a is closed, and the second round game R is completed.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) may be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 in each round game R wins the second specific prize opening 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage flow path 1231.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of stored balls is 14 when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side. Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. Limited to 4 through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be acquired by the player who plays the jackpot game of the jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 x 4C). This makes it possible to prevent the number of payouts from changing significantly due to differences in game modes (launch timing, launch intervals, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second round. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the second specific winning opening 2255a is closed, and the second round game R is completed.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150 as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) may be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 in each round game R wins the second specific prize opening 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage flow path 1231.

After that, similarly, the third to seventh rounds of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the seventh round of the round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds is completed. After the lapse of, the 8th round game R is started.

In the 8th round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the eighth round. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round ends.

Here, in the round game R before the 7th round, when the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specified winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is reached at the start of the 8th round round game R. Since the balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, in the 8th round round game R, only the number of winnings obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number by the 7th round) from the specified number is performed. Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, in the 8th round round game R, the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won, so wait for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1,, and then the next round. It will move to the game.

Therefore, the player suffers from the feeling that the extra prize balls paid out by the 7th round will be lost, and the time loss that the 8th round game R will be longer than necessary. Will receive. As a result, by the 7th round, it is possible to carefully play the game so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning of balls exceeding a predetermined number, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

If there is no prize exceeding the specified number in the 7th round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the 1 specific winning opening 1000a in the 8th round round game R, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the eighth round of the round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round. Therefore, the specified number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, it is in the interest of the player to intentionally suppress the winning of more than the specified number until the 7th round. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the 7th round can be maintained high.

When the jackpot game R in the eighth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the lapse of time Int1, the ninth round round game R is started. At the start of the ninth round of the round game R, it is possible to make the state that no ball remains in the storage flow path 1231.

In the 9th round, the solenoid 2810 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specified winning opening 2255a. Is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, the round is satisfied. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round ends.

After that, similarly, the 10th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In the round game R after the 9th round, the opening / closing plate 1300 does not open / close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specified winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the 9th round , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

Therefore, when performing a jackpot game of jackpot e, it is suppressed so that the second specified winning opening 2255a, which exceeds the specified number in the jackpot game R, is not won until the 7th round, and is specified in the jackpot game R after the 9th round. Aiming to win a prize in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the number is a gaming method in which the player can obtain the largest profit when considering the profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by putting more balls than the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains a profit and a case where the player suffers damage. As a result, different playability can be given to each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who plays the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being played indiscriminately). ..

Further, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the additional prize balls by making the second specific winning opening 2255a win the balls exceeding the specified number is substantially after the ninth round. Can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from changing significantly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state falls as it is is described, but the third embodiment has been described. The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the fall of a ball when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state so that a part of the ball can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulation member 1600, and a rear cover 1700, which are the same as those in the first embodiment. It is provided with a main body member 3100 and an lining front plate 3200 that are slightly different from those of one embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 32, the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown.

The main body member 3100 is in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1110, accommodating portion 1120, holding hole 1130, projecting portion 1140, discharge port 1150, rotary support portion 1160, and support claw portion 1170) provided in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , The additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner connected to the front view left side wall of the overlaid front plate 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and the additional winning opening 3181 facing upward from the front view left side wall portion. A curved extension plate 3182, which is curved and extended, is mainly provided.

The additional winning opening 3181 is an entrance for ejecting balls flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit is 15 when the ball enters the additional winning opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that regulates the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the vertical gap in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and is extended in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. .. Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed from a shape that inclines downward toward the left side of the front view from the middle abdomen and downwards inclines toward the right side of the front view from the middle abdomen.

The lining front plate 3200 is provided between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodating portion 1230 and detection sensor 1240) provided in the lining front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface to the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210 is provided in the region of.

The fall delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement locus of the opening / closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening / closing plate 3250, and is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. The extension plate portion 3251 which is a shaped portion and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 are connected to each other, and the upper surface has a concave curved shape. Mainly includes a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

The fall delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bounce and flow down due to rolling) for a distance of half the length of the plate. It is formed from the shape to be formed. The opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when the sphere flows down a distance of half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in 1 second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extended plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. It includes a facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b formed between the surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the accommodating portion 1230 and the accommodating portion 1230 at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere.

The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the sphere at the portion vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side of FIG. 32). In the part that is switched to the radius of the sphere or more at the intermediate position (mid-side position in the left-right direction of FIG. 32) and is arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the state of being arranged on the most downstream side (right side of FIG. 32). It is considered to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the facing surface 3251a is formed along the front-rear direction and smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 of the lining front plate 3200. It is composed of a shape (a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. This makes it possible to reduce the resistance when the sphere rolls in the front-rear direction on the rolling arc portion 3252.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the lining front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the route from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the drop position Pf3, which is a position separated to the right from the rolling arc portion 3252 and immediately before the ball falls, is the downstream position Pf2. It passes through and flows down.

In the present embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 of the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3250 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. , The ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the fall position Pf3. Hereinafter, the mode of flowing the sphere on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 in the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 31. Note that FIG. 34 (b) shows a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34 (c) shows a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere that rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diameter length (the length between the contact portion in the axial direction and the center of the sphere) to the contact portion with the drop delay plate 3250 of the sphere is shortened as it flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34 (b), the diameter length r1 to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the fall delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the diameter length r2 to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the fall delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the sphere.

These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis along the front-back direction. In other words, if the rotation speed of the sphere is the same, the shorter the diameter lengths r1 and r2, the lower the rolling speed of the sphere (the sphere is delayed). According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed so as to be inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of gyration of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side of FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, in FIG. 34 showing the axial view thereof, FIG. 34 (c) is compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). ), The sphere is displaced downward. That is, the more the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the more the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning opening 1000a. can.

As a result, even if the ball entry prevention portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and faces the first specific winning opening 1000a with that momentum. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning a prize by flying.

Next, a case will be described in which the opening / closing plate 1300 moves up to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 with reference to FIG. 35. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is a first variable winning device 3000 in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of. It should be noted that the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown in FIG. 35 (a), the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), and the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown in FIG. 35 (c). The outer shape of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), an example of a sphere that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable winning device 3000 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the sphere landing on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is kept in the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, by the action of the extension plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling speed of the sphere can be gradually reduced, the rolling time of the sphere can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the sphere can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the opening / closing plate 1300 rises (rotates) toward the open state while the sphere rolls, the sphere pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly rises and moves along the arc shape of the dynamic arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the sphere abuts at the start of movement of the sphere faces in the front-rear direction, it is possible to smooth the movement of the sphere at the start of operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. can.

The flow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the flow direction shown in FIG. 35 (a). Therefore, as compared with the case where the flow direction of the ball changes in a completely different direction before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. can.

In this way, the sphere is opened by the opening / closing plate 1300 moving upward from the state where the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35 (c)). By being pushed back (backflowing) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, a ball that is placed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once is in a state where it is impossible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a can be moved up to a state in which it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it can be returned, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In other words, in both FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), the state in which the sphere is placed upstream of the detection sensor 1240 is illustrated because the sphere may still pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that it is. That is, due to the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be continuously maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed.

Further, even when it becomes impossible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction close to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and it is possible to maintain the player's attention.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening / closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the falling of the ball that has reached the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then when the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring it so that it can be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that reaches in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that pass through the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and enter the first out port 66.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing plate 1300 from being hindered from being opened due to the arrangement of the sphere on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure such as a conventional gaming machine in which a ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate, the opening / closing plate operates to sandwich the ball between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening and closing. There is a problem that the opening of the board is hindered and there is a risk of loss for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the sphere is maintained (restricted) substantially constant while the sphere rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300. can do. Therefore, the sphere is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate and opened / closed as compared with the case where the sphere freely flows down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the sphere from the rotation axis changes freely. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is hindered can be reduced. In this embodiment, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the glass plate while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position of.

36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic views showing a flow mode of a sphere that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36 (a), the flow mode of the two balls that have reached the first variable winning device 3000 when the balls are left unattended is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball. By performing a special method of launching a ball weakly and launching a second ball strongly (so-called "twisting"), a ball when two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in a row. The flow mode of is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is left untouched and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is a ball. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by the P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be arranged on the upstream side of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, since it is possible to secure a long time for the ball P2 to flow down the fall delay plate 3250, it is easy to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36B, when two balls are connected to reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the state is switched, the ball P2 is arranged near the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (fall position Pf3), so that it cannot wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened next, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the board 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where two balls flow down in a row by a special striking method, when two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by leaving the ball (normal striking method). It is possible to make it more susceptible to the action of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds into a state in which the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, it is possible to suppress a game due to a special striking method such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, immediately after the opening / closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state, a sphere that bounces upward by colliding with the opening / closing plate 1300 is shown.

In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landing on the open / close plate 1300 is repelled while the open / close plate 1300 is ascending. Only, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG. 37.

Subsequent flow of the bounced ball is limited to either returning to the top surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. 37. Will be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive the prize ball. Therefore, the ball that reaches the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing while the opening / closing plate 1300 is switching to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot make a profit. Can be prevented.

Further, even if a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) can be separately won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the additional winning opening is won. The payout by winning the prize in the mouth 3181 will be the prize balls (additional profit) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, the profit that the player can obtain can be different depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening / closing plate 1300 to the open state. It is possible to improve the attention to the flowing ball.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the big hit regardless of the difference in the flow mode of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability fluctuation determination unit that determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol according to the difference in the flow mode of the sphere. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is enlarged and illustrated. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower portion of the storage flow path 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (main body member 1100, lining front plate 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulator agent. 1600 and a rear cover 1700) are provided, and further, a new probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 is provided in the fourth embodiment.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows down, and is a continuous passage 4810 extending vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that is communicated with the lower end of the communication passage 4810. The probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, which is a road, the specific area 4830 which is arranged in communication with the flow path on the left side of the front view of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and the specific area 4830 which is arranged in communication with the flow path on the right side of the front view. The non-specific area 4840, the distribution device 4850 which is arranged so as to interfere with the game ball at the branch portion of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, the specific area detection sensor 4860 which detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4830, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4860. It mainly includes a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

The communication passage 4810 is formed from a length that approximately 1 second elapses before the ball that has entered from the discharge port reaches the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

The distribution device 4850 is arranged so as to project inside the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the open position (forming the open state) and the non-specific area 4840 (closed state). It mainly includes a distribution operation member 4851 that can operate between the closed position (to be formed) and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol only in the special round (fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in the open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, the game shifts to a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change state of the special symbol), for example, 40. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1 in.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 50 times after the end of the big hit game, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed 50 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols, "big hit D", "big hit E", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit f" are provided (see FIG. 40). The details will be described later, but the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 4000 are configured. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type and special. It is stipulated in association with the type of entry slot that triggered the lottery of the design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot D is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot E is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 49" (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the 7th operation pattern of the 1st variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and rarely obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79", the jackpot F is associated and defined (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot F is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the 8th operation pattern of the 1st variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99", the jackpot G is associated and defined (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot G is obtained, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the 8th operation pattern of the 1st variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls and rarely obtain the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As mentioned above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), there is a 50% chance of the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, in rare cases, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94". The jackpot f is specified in association with each other (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot f is reached, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with the jackpot g (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot g is reached, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640), there is a 95% probability that the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 will be the sixth. It works with the working pattern. At this time, since the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be almost certainly acquired, the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) It is advantageous for the player as compared with the case of a big hit. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the player plays a right-handed game in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits becomes longer (1). Seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol). Since the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which tends to be a big hit (a big hit that can acquire the right of), is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing the time timing change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled so as to be held, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

In the third round, as in the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the third round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and the third round round game R is completed.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the 4th round, unlike the start of other rounds, the measurement of the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 measures the timer means (not shown) until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time. After the elapse of OP3, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the solenoid is used to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. The 4852 is driven and controlled so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the passage of the sphere to the specific area 4830 is not allowed.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a predetermined number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, the ball can be fired one by one at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is usually estimated that only about 5 balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since the storage flow path 1231 is filled with about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, the discomfort given to the player by the time of the round game R in the 4th round being shorter than that of the other rounds is suppressed. can do.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R ends.

In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to 6), all the balls discharged are the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of stored balls is 7 or more), at least one of the discharged balls is longer than the time required to pass through. The time is set to be shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In the present embodiment, since the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, even if the fourth round round game ends in the second operating time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 can be easily increased to 7 or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, unlike the conventional technique, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round round game R. , The opening / closing plate 1300 can be operated without any discomfort. This will be described below.

In the prior art, if a specified number of balls win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R ends before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operating member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be entered into the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Since the ball heading to the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round game R, the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened to operate the opening / closing plate 1300. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it prevents the problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning mode. can do.

Further, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage flow path 1231 during the first operating time T1, so that the first round game R in the fifth round It is possible to prevent the ball winning in the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. As a result, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the mode of winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the problem of changing whether or not it can be done.

<When operating with the 7th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

In the 4th round, unlike the start of other rounds, the measurement of the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 measures the timer means (not shown) until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time. After the elapse of OP3, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the solenoid is used to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. The 4852 is driven and controlled so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. It should be noted that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the sphere to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a predetermined number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, the ball can be fired one by one at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is usually estimated that only about 5 balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (global) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage flow path 1231 is not filled by about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the winning balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231 in 3 seconds. ..

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, about 5 balls are ejected from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the 5th round round game R, so for some rare reason, 8 or more balls in 3 seconds are the first winning openings. Unless a prize is won in 1000a, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced after all the discharged balls have passed through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not remain in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round round game R is the same as the above-mentioned sixth operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern is also used in this operation pattern. It is possible to produce the same effect as the effect in.

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored up to the vicinity of the full storage flow path 1231 during the fourth round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can subsequently acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the difference in the accumulation state of the spheres, so that the spheres are accumulated in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the first variable winning device 4000.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the round game R of the fourth round, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is acquired. However, since the time of the round game R is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more he fails to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

That is, the more unfamiliar the player is, the easier it is to play the game by leaving it unattended during the jackpot game, while the more accustomed to the game, the easier it is to avoid unleashing to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to stop between rounds. Is the difference that arises from.

In detail, in the case of an untouched game, a plurality of balls are always flowing down near the opening / closing plate 1300, and the balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Since it occurs, there is ample room for three or more balls to enter in three seconds. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

On the other hand, if the ball is stopped between rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing down the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300 during the interval period by starting the launch after the round game R of the fourth round starts, the waste ball is certainly a waste ball. Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening / closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the fourth round game R (for example, two seconds have not passed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to insert three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to encourage a player who is accustomed to the game to launch the game by leaving it unattended during the jackpot game.

As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent possibility that the profit obtained by a person who is accustomed to the game is reduced depending on the mode of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed to the game, it is possible to induce the player to play the game unattended during the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be guaranteed.

On the other hand, it is possible to provide a player who, after understanding the above-mentioned risks, still stops between rounds, a jackpot game that requires concentration, which cannot be experienced with other pachinko machines 10. .. That is, the number of wasted balls is reduced by performing a round stop hit in which the ball flows back into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round and the launch is started. However, it is also possible to acquire the right to shift to a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol. In this case, the stop between rounds is performed before the end of the third round round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform a high-level calculation to start launching while anticipating the timing of entering the ball while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering during the third round of the round game R. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, the interest of the player can be improved.

FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 8th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). After the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the fourth round round game R, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the fourth round round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. It should be noted that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation due to the passage of the third opening time OP3.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues at the maximum time of the first operating time T1, and 7 or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (reservoir). (When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than that at least a part of the ejected spheres passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, so that the fourth round round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If there are 7 or more spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the spheres remaining in the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be flowed down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round round game R is the same as the above-mentioned sixth operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern is also used in this operation pattern. It is possible to produce the same effect as the effect in.

<When operating with the 9th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above until the end of the third round game R, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

When the third round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). After the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the fourth round round game R, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the fourth round round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. It should be noted that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the sphere to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues at the maximum time of the first operating time T1, and 7 or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (reservoir). (When the number is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than that at least a part of the ejected spheres passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, since the fourth round round game R is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round round game R. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to finish the fourth round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, in many cases, when the fourth round game R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by winning a specified number of prizes. Immediately after that, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

On the other hand, if the distribution operation member 4851 waits for the fourth round game R to the maximum value of the first operation time T1 and ends, if the number of balls ejected in the interval immediately after that is 7 or more. The sphere can be made to flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, instead of rushing to win the specified number of balls, the player makes the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls just before the end of the fourth round game R, so that the player can win a special symbol. You can get the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state).

In addition, as another method, by ending the fifth round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball discharged at the interval immediately after the fifth round game R is placed in a specific area. By letting it flow down, the player can acquire the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, according to this operation pattern, at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, etc.), the player enters the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Whether or not you can acquire the right to transition can be different.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game R is specified. When the operation time is specified (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), by continuing the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, the player can play a special symbol no matter how the game is played. Since you can acquire the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state), you can play the game with confidence.

On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player selects the operation time by himself / herself according to the game mode (when to make the first specific winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls). By selecting), you may be able to acquire the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player an uplifting feeling to acquire the probabilistic state by himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the interval immediately after the third round round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round game with the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. When R is started, it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the fourth round game R is small, it is possible to realize a game property in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round game R is long enough to eject the ball of the storage flow path 1231, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given. Hard to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the playability that the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game are paid out more. As a result, it is possible to prepare a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later, so that it is possible to easily suppress the cash investment of the player.

Since these differences can be grasped by whether or not the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fourth round, the player predicts the state after the jackpot game at the start of the fourth round game R. can do. And, even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the mode of entering the ball. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in the present embodiment, by urging the player to make a choice, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the opposite.

More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round game R, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. By winning a prize, it is more likely that you will be able to acquire the right to move to a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol (it is beneficial to win many balls from the beginning of the 4th round). In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the fourth round game R, the specified number of balls are waited for winning until the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol (it is beneficial to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the 4th round).

In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes depending on the method of winning the ball in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to maintain the concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 10th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Since it is the same as the case of the sixth operation pattern described above until the end of the fourth round game R, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds). After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short time operation, basically, the sphere cannot flow down to the specific region 4830.

Further, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the fifth round game R, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. (For example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in this operation pattern, the fifth round round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, it is not possible to enter a specified number of balls, and it is not possible to end the fifth round game at an early stage. Therefore, it is not possible to let the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R flow down to the specific area 4830.

Then, when the fifth round game R is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round round game R has the same parts as the above-mentioned sixth operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of 6.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R in the fourth round. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific region 4830 even if the storage flow path 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. It differs in that it cannot be done.

That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the ball can be fully stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, and the discharged ball is a specific area. You can be prompted to see if you are going through 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of whether or not the ball can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate before the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 passes through. It can be divided into the stage of whether or not it is (second step), and attention can be paid to different points in each stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the player's concentration.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball can be obtained corresponding to the jackpot type regardless of the progress mode of the game in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol has been described, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment has been described. The 5000 is provided with a ball ejection adjusting device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire a large number of balls as the number of fluctuations until a jackpot is acquired in a probabilistic state (high probability state) of a special symbol is smaller. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 arranged near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, an lining front plate 2200, and the like, as in the second embodiment. In addition to being provided with an opening / closing plate 1300, a drive device 1500, and a regulation member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and a new addition in this embodiment. It mainly includes a ball ejection adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the ball ejection by allowing the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 to enter the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward from the lower end portion of the rotation tip portion 1421 of the extension portion 1420 along the shape of the rotation tip portion 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the lower tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where the solenoid 1510 comes into contact with the engaging portion 1333 of the closed opening / closing plate 1300 in the non-excited state.

In addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800 has an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly added shape and a transmission rod portion 2860 capable of sliding in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view. By being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (the rear view L-shaped portion added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), it is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball ejection adjusting device 5900. It is provided with a pressing action unit 5870 to be provided.

The exit ball adjusting device 5900 is formed and stored through the thin plate member 1100 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the flow path forming portion 5910 for flowing down the ball entering the second entry port 640 and the flow path forming portion 5910. Mainly, a communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) capable of allowing a sphere to flow into the flow path 1231, and an opening / closing member 5930 that opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with the drive of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. The flow path forming portion 5910 is arranged so as to pass through the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is shown by an imaginary line for easy understanding. And the illustration of the middle part is omitted.

The flow path forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which a ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is arranged facing the communication hole 5920 to move the ball to the communication hole 5920. After the number of adjusting flow paths 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of balls stored in the adjusting flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in this embodiment), the ball further enters the second entry port 640. It mainly includes a surplus ball discharge flow path 5915 for discharging the ball to the ball discharge path (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 is a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a back-view inverted U-shaped flow path that is curved by half a turn near the lower end portion, and a second entry port 640 from the upper end portion of the deceleration flow path 5912. It mainly includes a drop flow path 5913 extending in the vertical direction toward the rear.

Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load applied to the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent spheres staying in the deceleration flow path 5912 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 is reduced regardless of the number of spheres staying. be able to. That is, the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 is loaded by the weight of the subsequent sphere from the subsequent sphere, but the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle slope (near horizontal slope) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of spheres staying, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

Since the fall flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the flowing ball is not decelerated and falls freely. Therefore, when the balls enter the second entry port 640 in a row, the former ball is decelerated earlier than the latter ball, and the flow of the latter ball is obstructed, so that the latter ball is erroneously entered. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915.

In the present embodiment, the adjusting flow path 5911 causes balls to stay in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball is the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, after the 31st ball, the ball enters the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. In other words, a maximum of 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this period, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, and the player can advance the game by a right-handed game, thereby suppressing the loss of the ball and aiming for the next big hit. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entry port 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, it stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state to the end of the high probability state. The number of spheres increases.

The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inward of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and the opening is closed below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Along with this, the movable closing member 5931 arranged at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931, and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected and can be moved in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110 and a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 with respect to the connecting rod portion 5932 so as to be movable up and down. Mainly includes an elastic spring 5934 having one end disposed on the connecting rod portion 5932 and applying an ascending urging force to the movable closing member 5931.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. 45. FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is open, and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a ball can flow in and stay in the storage flow path 1231 from the communication hole 5920, up to the third ball AP53 flows into the storage flow path 1231. However, the fourth ball AP54 is kept in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flow into the storage flow path 1231, and thus a communication hole. The space for the ball AP 54, which is kept in a position where it does not come off from the 5920, to enter the storage flow path 1231 is filled with the inflowing ball IP 51. Therefore, the sphere kept in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage flow path 1231 even after that, and is maintained in the same position.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-excited and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharged state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhanging adjusting flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231. The inflow of balls is regulated.

When the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow path 1231 is completed, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. The spheres up to 1231 flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment flow path 5911 into the storage flow path 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is defined as a maximum of three per opening of the communication hole 5920. To.

A case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 47 (a), the solenoid 1510 is excited, and in FIG. 47 (b), the solenoid 1510 is de-excited and the tip of the time difference forming portion 5423 is on the back side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (FIG. 47). In FIG. 47 (c), a state in which the time difference forming portion 5423 is arranged above the engaging portion 1333 is shown in the state of being arranged on 47 (b) on the front side of the paper surface), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass through.

When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520, closing the communication hole 5920 while engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. Since the portion 1333 still abuts on the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening / closing plate 1300 is restricted, the restricting member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulation member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the ball accumulated in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path is guided by the momentum of the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing from the 5911.

48 (a) and 48 (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operations of the regulation member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 48 (a), the non-excited state of the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 is shown, and in FIG. 48 (b), the excited state of the solenoid 2810 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved up and moved by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened so that the sphere can flow into the storage flow path 1231, while the non-excitation makes the communication hole 5920 open. It is closed and the inflow to the storage channel 1231 is restricted.

In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the mechanism described above, a fixed number of balls (up to 3 in this embodiment) flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the jackpot game is completed, the special symbol is given a probabilistic state (high probability state) until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. After the end, it is configured to be set to the normal state. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). The details will be described later, but the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. It is composed.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type and special. It is stipulated in association with the type of entry slot that triggered the lottery of the design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". Is defined in association with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the big hit h. Are associated with each other and specified (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls, and can win a predetermined number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a payout of the specified upper limit.

If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99". Are associated and specified (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot i is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of prize balls to be paid out and the time required for the big hit game are variable according to the number of balls entered in the second entrance 640 until the big hit is acquired.

That is, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit. If a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry opening 640), the prize ball will be awarded according to the number of balls entered in the second entry opening 640 until the big hit is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the game of winning a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the payout of prize balls depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Gender can be added. As a result, it is possible to suppress the play of the right-handed game indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the 11th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

In the first round game R, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication hole 5920 is opened, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). 2 When storing spheres from the storage flow path 2251 to the storage flow path 1231, since 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, how many spheres (1 to 1) flow in from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. There is no problem even if the number is 3), and the round game R can be completed by winning a specified number (10C).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means causes the solenoids 1510 and 2810 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds, the second round game R is started. Here, since a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the interval of 3 seconds, a part of the storage flow path 1231 and the second storage flow path 2251 at the end of the first round game R. Balls that can be stored in a row (up to 14) can be discharged globally.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the second round. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 2255a, so that the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the second specific winning opening 2255a is closed, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int3 between rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 from the adjustment flow path 5911 for each drive operation (excitation) of the solenoid 2810. Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls is stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the whole ball is stored by the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the 10th round game R). Since the ball can be entered into the road 1231, the jackpot game can be completed without the ball remaining in the storage flow path 1231.

<When operating with the 12th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). The solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started. Since the operation pattern up to the fourth round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 is used to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specified winning opening 1000a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round round game R ends.

Here, even in the fifth round of the round game R, the ball can flow in from the through hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the through hole 5920 is actually performed, a predetermined number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the fifth round of the round game R of this operation pattern is smaller than that of the prize balls that can be obtained in the round game R of the same round in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first one. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is prolonged.

After that, similarly, the 6th to 15th rounds of the round game R are repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open / close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, the decrease in the number of prize balls that may occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time mean that the balls flow from the through hole 5920 into the storage flow path 1231. This is caused by this, and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the start of the jackpot changes the extent to which the number of prize balls decreases and the round time is extended. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of balls that have passed through the second entry port 640, while the special symbol 2 lottery (second entry opening) is due to the passage of the balls in the second entry port 640. Since the lottery based on the entry into the 640) can be received, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Let's assume that are the same number.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a is opened once, so that three balls flow into the storage flow path 1231. That is, up to the fourth round game R, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into the storage flow path 1231. Therefore, in the fifth and subsequent round games, the balls flow into the storage flow path 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911. If. In other words, after shifting to the high probability state, the jackpot game is started with the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) 13 times or more. ..

Therefore, if a big hit is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the 12 times of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the number of prize balls will decrease. Since the round time is not extended, the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

In addition, even after the 13th lottery, the number of prize balls will decrease for each lottery, and the round time will be extended for each 3 lottery. Can improve the attention of.

That is, for example, when a jackpot is won with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), the balls are stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow path 1231 is 2, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. If a big hit is won with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number of balls that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of prize balls paid out decreases in the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in any case, the ball that remains in the adjustment flow path 5911 by flowing into the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fifth round round game R. Is 0. Therefore, from the 6th round round game R, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, whereby the 6th round round game R can be completed, so that the round time can be reached. There is no change in the degree of extension.

Further, when the number of remaining adjustment flow paths 5911 in the case of winning a big hit is 16 to 18, in the 6th round round game R, when 19 to 21, in the 7th round round game R, 22 to 24 When there are pieces, in the 8th round round game R, when there are 25 to 27 pieces, in the 9th round round game R, and when there are 28 to 30 pieces, in the 10th round round game R, the number of prize balls decreases. And the extension of the round time occurs.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, in the game property in which the high-probability state ends depending on the number of lottery, the case where the big hit is obtained immediately after the transition to the high-probability state and the case where the big hit is obtained just before the end of the high-probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the profit given to the player (the number of prize balls paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.).

In this case, in the present embodiment, as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the acquisition of the jackpot increases, the profit given to the player decreases. Therefore, when the number of lottery until the jackpot is acquired is small, Originally, there should have been a high probability of receiving a lottery even with the remaining number of lottery, but the player's dissatisfaction that he cannot receive it can be partially resolved.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the first lottery after becoming a high probability state, you should be able to add the remaining 29 lottery and receive 59 lottery next time. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the jackpot game is limited to 30 times again can be partially resolved. As a result, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Even in the high probability state, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry opening 64), the second specific winning opening 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It will be possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of lottery times after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may perform a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning a ball in the first ball opening 64 in a high probability state.

In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 does not lead to the lottery of the special symbol, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 increases, the interval at which the lottery can be received becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. It may be long.

Therefore, as a method of playing in a high-probability state, the player can receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 before the jackpot is acquired. Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game), or by the time you win the jackpot, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 will increase, and you are prepared for a longer game time, so you can play the jackpot game. It is possible to appropriately select whether to acquire a jackpot of a jackpot type (big hit H) that can eliminate the risk of a drop in the prize ball (whether to play a left-handed game). As a result, the range of game methods to be selected can be expanded according to the player's taste and the situation (playable time, etc.).

After the high probability state ends, it becomes difficult to open the second entrance 640, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911, but in the jackpot of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained by the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning a specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (profit in terms of both the number of prize balls and the playing time) is not impaired. Therefore, even if the player stops the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start the game at any time.

In this embodiment, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (second entry). The number of balls entered into the mouth 640) is assumed to be the same, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of winning the jackpot is the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is acquired. It should be noted that the number is rarely the same as the number of lottery.

That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when the ball wins in the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the big hit has been won in the lottery after that, the reach production and the subsequent reach production. , Since it is after the button pressing effect and the like, the player usually keeps hitting the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is possible to hold up to four balls entering the second entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player efficiently receives a lottery, so-called hold stop). In addition to the number of lottery in which the player can recognize the judgment of the jackpot, a state in which a maximum of about four balls are entered into the second entrance 640 is maintained.

Further, even if the ball enters the second entry port 640 when the number of holdings is the maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment flow path 5911, so that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game is obtained. It is more likely to decrease. The hold is digested when the fluctuation is stopped and the next fluctuation is started, so in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuation is stopped, the more likely it is that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game will decrease. It will be.

Therefore, if the ball is left unattended during a highly anticipated production such as long reach, it is possible to form a playability in which the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is likely to decrease. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a highly anticipated production such as long reach, eliminating the concentration that the player has devoted to adjusting the shot output of the ball. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on the production such as long reach, and it is possible to improve the attention to the production.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the spheres by driving. The arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is a specific region 4830. It is configured so that the state after the big hit game changes depending on whether or not it passes through.

FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 on the LII-LII line of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering member 1200, opening / closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulation member 1600 and In addition to the rear cover 1700), the new interference device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 arranged on the back surface side of the main body member 1100 and a slide movable shaft arranged along a plane surface and a flat surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the tip of a movable portion of the solenoid 6910. It mainly includes a tip member 6920 fixed to the body member 6920 and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined so as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the tip end side of the tip member 6920.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage flow path 1231 of the lining front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. By this front-back operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage flow path 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly leftward from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage flow path 1231. The interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to bring it into an overhanging state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), so that the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53 (a) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53 (b) shows the case where the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. In addition, the sphere that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and "V" is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to the thirteenth operation pattern and the fourteenth operation pattern described later. ..

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, 10 balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the retracted state of the interference member 6930, while the third ball is stored in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage flow path 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of balls for each round game R of the jackpot game is set to 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since it is not possible to end the round game R by winning a specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R will be waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the explanation of the game mode in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change state of the special symbol), for example, 4 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10 times after the end of the big hit game, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed 10 times. While it is configured to be set to the normal state after the end, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, it is normal until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to shorten the time of the design.

In the present embodiment, two types of "big hit I" and "big hit j" are provided as the big hit types of the special symbol. The details will be described later, but the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to move to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first ball entry port 64), the big hit I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). .. When the jackpot I is obtained, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 prize balls and can almost certainly not acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the big hit j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

When the jackpot j is reached, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the 14th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As mentioned above, if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is almost certainly acquired. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64) is a big hit. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the player plays a right-handed game in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol. conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits becomes longer (1). Seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, and it becomes easy for the special symbol 2 to be drawn. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the jackpot j (almost certainly shifts to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol). Since the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is a big hit that can acquire the right of the above, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing the time timing change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 1000a and the specific area 4830.

In addition, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operating time TL). Will be done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the lengths of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the time relationship described below.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the 13th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the interference member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state by the long-term operating time TL, and after the long-term operating time TL elapses, the solenoid 6910 is driven so as to hold the interfering member 6930 in the retracted state again. It is controlled to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the present embodiment, the interfering member 6930 is in an overhanging state for a long operating time TL. During this time, the storage channel 1231 cannot be awarded a specified number of balls (see FIG. 53 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operating time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operating time T1, so that the interference member 6930 must wait until the maximum value of the first operating time T1. Is in a retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a predetermined number of balls, and the round game R of the first round ends with the lapse of the first operating time T1.

At the same time as the end of the first round game R, the interference member 6930 is changed to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage flow path 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the keys in the retracted state, respectively, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating with the 14th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the 14th operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and the first round game R is started after the opening time OP elapses.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening / closing plate 1300 is allowed to operate for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) elapses the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the 6th opening time OP6 elapses, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interfering member 6930 is changed to the overhanging state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the minute time, the interfering member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening / closing member 1300 is closed, the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the first round game R is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is rounded. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the first. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the second round game R is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled so as to hold the keys in the retracted state, respectively, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time during which the number of winning balls is expected to be 3 or more and less than 6 in the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage flow path 1231, the player's line of sight is blocked by the ball, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, since the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the slight movement of the third and subsequent balls in the storage flow path 1231, the player recognizes whether or not the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It can be made difficult, and the game of winning a ball in the first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 can be enjoyed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be done.

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage flow path 1231, and even then, when the first round round game R is not completed, a sense of incongruity is given for the first time, and the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is actually counted. It is possible to form a new playability by recognizing the difference in jackpot type for the first time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can use the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easy-to-recognize manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the first variable winning device 6000.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed has been described, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment has been described. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that a ball arranged at a vertical position of the drop position Pf3 can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the inverted front plate 7200 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is a top view of XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the 1st variable winning apparatus 7000 in the line corresponding to a line. Since the configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment other than the lining front plate 7200 is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the lining front plate 7200 has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodating portion 1230, detection sensor 1240, and drop delay plate 3250). ), The second drop delay plate 7260 newly introduced in the present embodiment is provided.

The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending from the end surface 3251b to the accommodating portion 1230 on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210, and the upper surface 7261 thereof descends so as to separate from the detection sensor 1240. Tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is extended rearward to the extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 is set so that the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is less than the diameter of the sphere in the vicinity of the detection sensor 1240, and at the position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 57) of the movement locus of the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the rolling sphere of the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second fall delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose presence or absence of contact with the sphere changes depending on the arrival path of the sphere. This will be described below.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line of FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 58 (a) shows a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state while the ball is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. In the meantime, the case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the sphere is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere is an inverted front plate due to the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 that occurs during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, in the process of flowing down, it comes into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 and falls again at the drop position Pf3. To reach.

Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the momentum of the sphere is set. It is possible to prevent the sphere from vertically falling on the back surface side of the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the large size.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the sphere that rolls the fall delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is on the main body member 3100 side along the rearward inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while contacting.

At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is arranged below the second fall delay plate 7260, the extension length of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the back surface side is set from the movement locus of the sphere. The ball falling from above can be caught by the upper surface 7261 while being fastened on the front side.

The sphere that rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not abut on the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and after reaching the drop position Pf3, falls as it is. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped without delay from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the sphere is affected by the second fall delay plate 7260 and the case where the sphere is not affected by the action of the second fall delay plate 7260, depending on which side the sphere is closer to the second fall delay plate 7260.

In the present embodiment, two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the rolling ball of the fall delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, and the previous ball. Even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball arranged immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

Further, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the opening / closing plate 1300 happens to be closed when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the sphere rolls the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the left and then resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, the sphere can be substantially maintained on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 for more than the time required for rolling over the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300. This makes it possible to reduce the number of wasted balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first out port 66) that may occur during the interval time.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage flow path 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member for opening and closing the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can do it. In this case, even if the operating length of the second discharge port regulating member is not strictly controlled, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged. Therefore, the number of balls discharged can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge the ball globally can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 operates in rotation has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is composed of an opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and can guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is placed in the upper position, and when it is placed in the lower position, the ball can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a. You may try to divert. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the lining front plate 3200 when raising the ball, the raising operation of the ball can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be located in the middle of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum number of possible discharges can be changed depending on whether the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1710 or from an additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the ball clogged on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. Further, by opening both discharge ports at the same time to discharge the ball, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be improved and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts the operation based on the operation timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the spheres depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of ejected balls.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly different has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball to enter the ball changes depending on whether or not there is a gap for the ball to enter in the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the storage channel 1231 is full). It is not always limited to this. For example, it may be configured to decelerate a predetermined ball entering the storage flow path 1231 depending on whether or not the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 is close to the full tank state. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231, it is possible to suppress winning more than the specified number. Further, in this case, as compared with the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed while suppressing the winning of a predetermined number or more. In addition, it is not limited to deceleration but may be accelerated. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than the specified number of prizes.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231 and the ball is restricted from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a by the stored ball is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a non-motorized driven member may be provided, which operates by a predetermined amount by passing a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a, and facilitates regulation of ball entry in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be shortened as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged at one time.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where a specified number of spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specified number + 1 ball may be stored. In this case, the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the passage of the eleventh ball is restricted may be switched for each round.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls cannot be won at the same time. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the ball may be held only for one ball and may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. Further, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be arranged in the storage flow path, and the flow path may branch toward the outlet in the middle. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can be left in the storage flow path 1231 regardless of which outlet the balls are discharged from.

In the second embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not always limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the specified number of winning balls (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball is entered from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or greater than the specified number of winnings (counting number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure the playability that the round time is inevitably extended when the ball is entered from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the whole ball is discharged at the interval between rounds.

In the third embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted upward by the opening / closing plate 1300 again is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball may be raised by a movable accessory having a constant motion capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (fall delay plate 3250) is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide in a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and ribs protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be arranged above the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, when the opening / closing plate 1300 that slides is in the open state, the ball may not come into contact with the rib, and when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball may come into contact with the rib. As a result, even above the opening / closing plate 1300, the flow speed of the sphere can be changed to delay the flow.

As a method of preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, the sphere may be moved to either the front or the back by tilting in the front-rear direction, and the rib may be arranged on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment, the case where the flow of the sphere is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the flow path connecting the inlet and the exit may be composed of a curved flow path passing through the back surface side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that has once become difficult for the player to see due to the opening / closing plate 1300 by passing through the entrance from the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and flowing down the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300 is discharged from the exit again. Since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, even if the interval is long, the ball is delayed until the next round is started. It is possible to secure a sufficient section for.

It is desirable that the entrance is below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the exit is above the opening / closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed to the extent that the passage of the ball can be prevented by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, the opening / closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extending plate portion 3251 may be configured to be gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flow direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

Further, the change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. When the sphere accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of a continuous sphere on the fall delay plate 3250.

In the third embodiment, the case where the fall delay plate 3250 is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 so that only the sphere that has passed downward through the opening / closing plate 1300 is brought into contact with the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a front / rear slide type opening / closing plate, in an open state, a ball enters a pocket in which a winning opening is arranged, and in a closed state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and the rolling ball opens and closes. A rib that can be contacted when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. The ball that enters the pocket as it is does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the sphere can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

In the third embodiment, the case where the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted from the formation at the drop position Pf3 and the ball falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole through which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 can pass is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through hole. You may do so. In this case, even when the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state when the sphere is arranged at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the sphere can be arranged above the opening / closing plate 1300.

This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and has landed on the fall delay plate 3250 is directly to the right (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 due to the same drop flows down to the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period during which the flow of the sphere is delayed and the path through which the sphere flows are different below the opening / closing plate 1300.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the flow path through which the balls entering from the second entry port 640 and the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down joins the storage flow path 1231 and the number of balls entering is related to each other will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied into the storage flow path 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the profit obtained by the player decreases as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased in the high probability state is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the more the number of lottery until the jackpot is won, the more profit the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained over a long period of time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operating member that operates in the storage flow path 1231 according to the number of stored spheres and changes the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 may be provided. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored units regardless of the driving timing of the driving device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to reasons such as the operating timing of the operating member being different from the normal one.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored in the storage flow path 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the portion forming the storage flow path 1231 (particularly, the U-shaped portion) is configured to move in the extension direction (left-right direction) of the flow path to change the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231. May be. In this case, even if the movement is made in advance, it is difficult for the player to notice whether or not the movement has been made due to the small amount of the movement. Therefore, it is possible to form the playability that the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) is noticed only after the ball is accumulated in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be formed. Can be improved.

The member may be moved by the driving force of the solenoid, or the member may be moved only by switching whether or not the member can be moved by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the sphere itself.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an overhanging state may be formed before the ball begins to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow path 1231 can be seven. Further, a pattern that forms an overhanging state after the spheres are stored and a pattern that forms an overhanging state before the spheres start to enter the storage flow path 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, the round in which the number of stored pieces is 7 and the round in which the number of stored pieces is 9 can be switched by a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage flow path 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be able to change to an overhanging state while the ball is being discharged from the storage flow path 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing of discharging the sphere and the timing of setting the interference member 6930 in the overhanging state, the mode of discharging the sphere can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Points that do not allow you to win more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine provided with an entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detection means for detecting the entry into the entrance. The game is characterized in that the detection means includes a ball entry prevention means that makes it difficult for the balls to pass through the entry slot when it is detected that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entry slot in a predetermined period. Machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is present between the start of operation of the operating member and the fall of the ball from the operating member. There is a possibility that the ball passes through the detection port, so that there is a problem that a predetermined number or more of balls may pass through the detection port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means makes it difficult for a predetermined number of balls or more to pass through the detection means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state of being arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage when the ball passes through the entrance is determined by the number of balls within the predetermined number and the predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with the subsequent spheres. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

As the ball entry prevention means, a means for changing the ease of passage of the ball entry port according to the detection result of the detection means, a means for constantly fixing the ease of passage of the ball entry port, etc. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means includes a storage means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the ball entry port, a discharge port through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the accommodation means, and a discharge port thereof. A discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through is provided, and the accommodating means is between the ball entry port and the discharge port. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is formed in a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the accommodating means is formed with a volume in which a predetermined number of balls can be accommodated between the entry port and the ejection port, so that the ejection can be switched. When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the accommodating means, it is possible to prevent the balls accommodated in the accommodating means from passing a predetermined number or more of the balls through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the balls after the predetermined number from passing through the entry port.

The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, while the discharge switching means is in the first state, the ball entry switching means is sustainably formed in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodating means from the entrance port while the ball is being ejected from the accommodating means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means may be simultaneous or different.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine A2 or A3 includes a driving means that is also used as the discharge switching means and the ball entry switching means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. As a result, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the ball entry switching means starts the state change from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means changes from the first state to the first state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the state change start is ordered in a mode of starting the state change toward two states, and the state change is completed substantially at the same time.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the accommodating means after the entry switching means is in the first state is discharged from the discharge port. While preventing (preventing irregular winning), the ball entry switching means can be started from the second state before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port is completed, so that the ball is discharged from the discharge port. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that flow down the game area and head toward the out port through the ball entry switching means, as compared with the case where the ball entry switching means is started after the completion of the above.

The order of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting a driving force to each switching means, or a dedicated driving means is provided for each switching means to control the timing. May be.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that any of the gaming machines A2 to A5 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum number of the accommodation means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodating means can be changed by the changing means, so that the maximum number of accommodating means can be changed temporarily (for example, in a specific round). It is possible to form a state in which more balls than the number of balls are accommodated in the accommodating means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, by using the accommodating means having the same shape, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine by changing a predetermined number of numerical values (it is possible to cope with the difference in specifications). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the shape is made for each specification.

In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is communicated with the first entrance and the accommodating means downstream of the first entrance, so that the ball flowing down the gaming area can pass through the entrance. It is provided with a second ball entry port whose passage is switched by the ball entry switching means, and a case where a ball enters the storage means from the first ball entry port and the case where the ball enters the storage means from the second ball entry port. The maximum number of accommodating means is changed depending on whether the ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets from which entry port the ball can pass through. Game machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, both the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can be stored in the accommodating means. Therefore, the space required can be reduced as compared with the case where separate accommodation means are arranged for each.

In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interfering means capable of extending to the inside of the accommodating means, and the interfering means interferes with a ball overhanging and stored inside the accommodating means, and the accommodating means. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the maximum number of accommodating means is changed depending on the case of being evacuated to the outside.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls accommodated is changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodating means without changing the entry path of the balls into the accommodating means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodations without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine A8, the interfering means projects from the back side of the gaming area to the inside of the accommodating means, and is characterized in that the ball can be arranged on the front side at the time of evacuation. Game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by a ball arranged in front. As a result, the operation of the interfering means can be made inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. , A delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entry port when the ball entry switching means is in the second state as compared with the case where the ball entry switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big winning opening is turned sideways, and a predetermined number of balls are detected by an operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection opening. There is a gaming machine that operates when it passes through the mouth and drops a ball that is on the operating member during the operation to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port of the detection means. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably configured to flow down to the out port, is it possible to launch the ball so as not to generate a ball falling from the operating member? There was a problem that some of the actual ball launches occurred depending on whether or not (the skill of the player's launching technique was high or low).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the delay means acts. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at the upstream position of the ball entry port until the ball entry switching means switches to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is located upstream of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the player's launching technique on the actual launch of the ball, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a drop regulating means that is composed of a horizontally long member that supports the ball from below and regulates the fall to the end, or a convex means formed from a protrusion that decelerates the ball by contact.

In the gaming machine B1, the delay means is characterized in that, in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side, the degree of delay is increased as compared with the case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases when the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means increases. Can be improved.

The mode of the degree of delay is not limited in any way. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball entry switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the ball arranged on the downstream side has a larger distance from the opening direction of the entry port than the ball arranged on the upstream side. A gaming machine B3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in the downstream side of the delay means in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the entrance and the ball is increased. Is formed, it is possible to prevent the ball from directly entering the ball entry port when the ball flows down vigorously through the delay means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the ball entry switching means includes an ascending means for ascending the gaming area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means is the first. The gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the ascending means in the state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is arranged lower than the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball is placed from the ball entry switching means. The ball can be delayed after making the player visually recognize it as if it had fallen. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the sphere.

The gaming machine B4 is provided with an ascending regulating means that is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path of the ball with respect to the ascending means and that regulates the ascending movement of the ball and guides the ascending movement in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the ascending movement of the ball is regulated by the ascending regulating means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction, so that a load is applied to the ball when the ascending means ascending. It is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascending restricting means is allowed to enter and is provided with a relief entry port that gives a predetermined benefit to the player.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, as a profit different from the profit generated when the ball passes through the entrance due to the ball that has been loaded and flew when the ascending means is raised. , It is possible to give the player the benefit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even when the ball deviates from the flow path to the entrance of the ball, it is possible to prevent the attention from being reduced, and the movement of the ball can improve the interest of the player.

The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the delay means includes a variable acting portion having a different action on the ball depending on the mode of reaching the delay means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be different depending on the mode of reaching the delay means. This makes it possible to select each sphere and give it a different action.

It should be noted that the mode of difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, the difference in the arrival position of the ball with respect to the entry port may be used, or the difference in the flow direction of the ball until it reaches the delay means may be used.

In the gaming machine B7, the variable action unit delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position separated from the entry port by a predetermined distance or less, while separating the ball from the entry port by a predetermined distance or more. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action unit for the ball that is close to the entrance and the state of the entry switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by assuming that the variable action unit does not act on a ball that is far from the ball entry port and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball entry switching means.

<Points to adjust the ball launch of the jackpot game>
A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine provided with an entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detection means for detecting the entry into the entrance. When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, a ball that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port during the period in which the first state was formed before that. The gaming machine C1 comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in each round by switching the ball to open for a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each depends on the mode of launching the ball. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the number of balls passing through the entry port in the state where the entry switching means forms the first state by the number changing means is determined by the entry switching means before that. Since it can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port when one state is formed, the benefit given to the player in a series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state. Adjustments can be made.

The method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, when the ball entry switching means previously forms the first state, the ball enters the ball when the ball entry switching means forms the first state due to the fact that the ball has passed through a large number of balls. It may be an embodiment in which the number of balls that can enter the mouth is suppressed, or the player's benefit (not limited to the ball ejection) when the ball entry switching means then forms the first state due to the same event. For example, the acquisition of the right to move to a high-probability state may be performed).

In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes an accommodating means for accommodating a ball that has passed through the entry port, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits from the accommodating port, and the ejection port. A discharge switching means that can switch between a first state through which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the discharge switching means can be operated. The gaming machine C2 is characterized by comprising an operation mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the accommodating means depending on the difference in the operation mode.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the number of balls accommodated in the accommodating means can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the accommodating means. At the same time, the number of remaining spheres can be made variable. As a result, the number of balls required to fill the accommodating means with the balls can be changed, and the maximum number of balls passing through the entrance can be physically changed.

It should be noted that the mode of the difference in the operation mode is not limited in any way. For example, it is exemplified that the operation period is different, or when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, which discharge switching means is operated (operation target) is different.

The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining a ball ejection interval from the ejection port.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the ejection interval of the balls from the ejection port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the ejection is performed regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be specified according to the length of the period in which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval predetermined by the jackpot symbol.

The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, a flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately before the discharge port from the ball following the discharge port is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the accommodation means. A rib that is convex and gives a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as the means.

In the gaming machine C3, the spacing maintaining means is provided with a protrusion protruding from the inner surface of the accommodating means in the flow path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the protruding portion is projected into the flow path, so that the flowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball is closer to the discharge port. It is possible to prevent the flow speed from changing significantly between the ball and the ball having a short distance from the discharge port, and it is possible to make the flow speed of the ball uniform.

In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing balls to flow continuously in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protrusions are staggered from facing surfaces constituting the discharge path. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately projected from the facing surfaces at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path to cause the balls to collide with each other. It is possible to collide with the protrusions at predetermined intervals while shifting the position in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine C5, the accommodating means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the flow speed of the ball is formed to be higher than the flow speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the ball rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flows down at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the discharge path, so that the ball stored in the accommodating means Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port can be kept constant.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the entry port is provided with a starting port for determining a big hit of a special symbol by passing a ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of jackpot determinations of the special symbol can be associated with the number of balls entering the ball entrance. As a result, the number of payouts in the jackpot game can be changed depending on the number of determinations of the special symbol required to acquire the jackpot.

The gaming machine C7 includes a starting ball passing switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodating means, and the starting ball passing switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices arranged can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port independently. The first and second outlets are made possible by the accommodating means depending on whether the ball is ejected from the first outlet or the second outlet (under the same conditions). The number of remaining spheres may be arranged at a changeable position.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the accommodation means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so that the flow speed of the balls flowing down the accommodation means has changed. Even in some cases, the number of balls ejected from the accommodating means can be maintained.

The arrangement of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited in any way. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at the intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branch flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You can do it.

Further, the operation mode of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are open, the time required to eject the same number of balls from the accommodating means can be shortened as compared with the case where the balls are ejected from a single ejection port. As a result, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the out port during the jackpot game can be reduced.

By the way, the first discharge port may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means, and the second discharge port may be arranged on the upstream side of the first discharge port.

In this case, when the ball is discharged from the second discharge port, the ball arranged between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is used as the accommodating means regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be retained. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodating means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after ejecting the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the accommodating means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end portion of the accommodating means.

In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodating means, it is possible to switch from which discharge port the last ejected ball is ejected depending on the operation mode of the ejection switching means, so that the balls are ejected. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the ejection mode of the ball. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port the last discharged ball is discharged from, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow mode of the ball.

<Points to adjust the ball output of the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine provided with an entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detection means for detecting the entry into the entrance. A switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls have passed through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state, and a switching drive means thereof. After the switching drive by the switching drive means is started, the post-drive entry state switching means capable of forming an allowable state for allowing the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a restricted state for restricting the passage of the ball, and a post-drive entry state switching means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being provided with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in each round by switching the ball to open for a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each depends on the mode of launching the ball. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the post-drive entry state switching means switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entry port is closed by the switching drive means, so that an extra ball can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the drive-after ball entry state switching means forms the restricted state in the first ball entry port. However, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the allowable state is formed at the second entrance.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is exceeded depending on whether the ball passes through the first entrance or the second entrance. Since it is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be entered, it is possible to improve the attention to which entry opening the entry switching means opens.

In the gaming machine D2, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and when the ball entry switching means starts switching to the second state, the first ball entry port is from the front side of the opening. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a ball arranged on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entry port, the ball is dropped while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. It can be dropped into the ball and kept away from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent a ball exceeding a specified number from passing through the first ball entry port.

<Point where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
The game area in which the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine provided with an entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, and a detection means for detecting the entry into the entrance. The ball entry port is provided with a storage means for accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port, and the ball entry port is provided with at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the first ball entry port is provided. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in each round by switching the ball to open for a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each depends on the mode of launching the ball. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port merge inside the accommodating means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls, so that the first ball entry port is used. The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port (the number of payouts associated therewith) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodating means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodating means by passing through the first entry port and the accommodation by passing through the second entry port. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls is ejected in the closed state of each entrance. The upper limit is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entry port, and the first ball entry port is opened during the opening when the second ball entry port is opened a plurality of times. The gaming machine E3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before the opening of the first entrance and the second entrance after the opening of the first entrance are opened. The ball that has passed can be different from the actual benefit given to the player.

That is, when the ball passes through the second ball slot before the opening of the first ball slot, even if the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball slot has passed through the second ball slot, the ball has passed. The amount is not discharged, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the residual amount is accommodated from the first entrance, so that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the second entrance from the first entrance is the same as the number that can be accommodated in the second entrance. The player can only get the same profit as if he passed the number of.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball slot after the first ball slot is opened, and if more than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball slot has passed through the second ball slot, they are deducted. The player can gain additional benefits because it is not.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. In a gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port. It is characterized by being disposed in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the entry port, and being provided with an interference means that can be switched between an overhanging state that can interfere with the ball and a retracted state that does not interfere with the ball. The gaming machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the big winning opening during the big hit game is such that a specified number of balls can be inserted for a long time and a specified number of balls can be inserted. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in each round by switching the ball to open for a short time, which is impossible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 181572 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big prize opening is independent in each round, and each depends on the mode of launching the ball. There was a problem that there was a possibility of making a difference.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the interference means is arranged in the flow path of the ball passing through the ball entry port. Therefore, by keeping the interference means in the overhanging state, from the ball entry port to the interference means. It is possible to clog the ball in the path of the ball and prevent more balls from passing through the entrance. Thereby, the prize ball can be adjusted throughout the jackpot game depending on the operation mode of the interference means.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the gaming machine F1 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state while the ball is stationary in front of the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to, the movement can be hidden by a sphere. Therefore, it is possible to make the movement less noticeable to the player.

In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed, and the above-mentioned aspect of switching of the stopping means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the mode of changing the state of the interfering means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, a plurality of types of modes of changing the state of the interfering means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured, so that the stopping means can be maintained in the passing state while being maintained. The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed by a plurality of types.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize can be won from the attacker's movement>
A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. The ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state where the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. In a gaming machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by The gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the giving means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, the ball can pass through the profit-giving means and the ball passes through the profit-giving means. Since it can be switched between the impossible case and the impossible case, it does not block the ball from entering the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the entrance.

The gaming machine G1 is provided with a stopping means arranged on the upstream side of the profit switching means and switching between a stopping state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped. As the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stopping state to the passing state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means switches the profit. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching a means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the ball that has passed through the entrance is stopped once by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball becomes profitable at any timing. It is possible to prevent the switching means from being reached. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing no matter how the ball passes through the ball entry port while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. can.

The gaming machine G2 is characterized by comprising a period changing means for switching the stopping means to the passing state and then changing the period during which the ball flowing down through the stopping means can reach the profit switching means. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after the ball passes through the stopping means changes due to the period changing means, so that after the ball passes through the stopping means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the playability of the ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

The period changing means may be a means for changing the flow speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts flowing. It may be a means for changing the number of balls stopped at the stopping means.

In the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls stopped by the stopping means can be switched according to the profit given to the player.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted by the number of balls stopped in the stopping means, so attention to the balls stopped in the stopping means can be predicted. You can improve your power.

The means for switching the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped in the stopping means can be changed by combining the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that.

That is, for example, when the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened and then the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, among the balls stopped in the stopping means. Since the number of balls flowing downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means even if a new ball does not enter from the entrance.

On the other hand, if the period during which the stopping means is passed is sufficiently long and then the period during which the entry switching means is set to the first state immediately after that is extremely shortened, among the balls stopped at the stopping means, In addition to the fact that the majority of the balls flow down to the downstream of the stopping means, no new balls enter from the entrance, so that the balls are hardly stopped at the stopping means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that, the ball is stopped at the stopping means regardless of the launch mode. The number of spheres can be changed.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ball entry switching means is provided with a setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of types of closed maintenance periods in which the second state is maintained, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closed maintenance period. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after the lapse of time.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball is a stopping means. Since the period from passing through to the switching of the profit switching means to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is the same, the gaming ball provides the profit-giving means. It is possible to control the case of passing and the case of not passing in a formable manner. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the attention to the flow of the sphere.

For example, a period in which the ball entry switching means is maintained in the first state for a sufficiently long period so that a specified number of balls can pass through the ball entry port, and immediately after that, the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closed maintenance period in the manner of making it extremely short (shorter than the ball passing through the stopping means reaches the profit switching means), the entry ball switching means becomes the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means from time to time, the period from the passing state of the stopping means to the first state of the profit switching means can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit-giving means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls stopped at the stopping means and the mode of stopping (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the balls that have passed through the stopping means pass through the profit-giving means.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is not caused by the first operation caused by the specified number of balls entering the ball entry port, but by the second operation caused by the passage of the specified time. The gaming machine G6 is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting so as to be provided.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time by the action of the intentional selection means. It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passage mode of the ball at the entrance. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of time that the ball does not allow to enter the ball while the profit switching means is set to the first state.

As an intentional selection means, it is exemplified that the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally clogging (not allowing) the ball on the way through the entrance.

<Point 2, which makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize can be won from the attacker's movement, there is a paca>
The game area where the ball flows down, the entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and the first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. The ball entry switching means for switching the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in the second state where the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, the detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A profit-giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit-giving means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine including a profit switching means that can be switched by, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is an operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the big winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the big winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entry port. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the sphere is reached by the profit switching means.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the number of balls related to the time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the player can know how the ball is guided to the profit switching means from the length that the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means.

The gaming machine H1 or H2 is characterized in that a start state is formed in which the ball is started to be thrown to the profit switching means while the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state. Since the first state can be set again, it is possible to form a playability that the throwing to the profit switching means is not necessarily started even if the operation is started from the first state. As a result, it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether or not the ball reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is characterized by being a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a large winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball that has entered the large winning opening.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily improving the attention to the ball that has entered the big winning opening. And.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a gaming area where the ball flows down, an entrance where the ball which has flowed down the game area passes, and a ball which flows down from the upstream side of the entrance. A ball entry switching means that can switch between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the ball entry port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and the ball entry port. A first state in which a detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball, a profit-giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the ball passing through the ball-entry port, and a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit-giving means. In a gaming machine provided with a profit switching means capable of switching the ball to the profit-giving means in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided, a mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means depending on the operation mode of the ball entry switching means. Is configured to be variable.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is configured to be able to guide the number of balls related to the time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state to the profit switching means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. Will be done.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, in which the ball is thrown to the profit switching means while the ball entry switching means is being switched from the first state to the second state. The starting state is formed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the attention to the ball that has entered the big winning opening.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the number of balls guided to the profit switching means can be changed depending on the time for operating the ball entry switching means. can.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the attention to the ball can be further improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 110 Main control device (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means)
640 2nd ball entry port (part of the ball entry port, starting port)
640a Electric accessory (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specific winning opening (part of the entry opening, 1st entry opening)
1140 Protruding part (part of spacing maintenance means, protruding part)
1150 Outlet (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means)
1231 Storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of post-drive entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path)
1231a Guide surface (part of spacing maintenance means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of spacing maintenance means, rolling discharge plate)
1235 Protruding part (part of spacing maintenance means, protruding part)
1240 detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Open / close plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Board part (ascending means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (drive means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching drive means)
1600, 2600 Regulatory members (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means)
2251 Second storage flow path (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of post-drive entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entry opening, 2nd entry opening)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entry opening)
3182 Curved extension plate (elevation regulation means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End surface (part of drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit-giving means)
4850 Sorting device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit-giving means)
5900 ball ejection adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period change means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)

Claims (1)

A game area in which a ball flows down, an entry port through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry port can be guided to the entry port and the entry ball. A gaming machine including a ball entry switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth in a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entry port, and a detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry port. In
A space-constructing means that constitutes a predetermined space in which up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entry port can exist at the same time.
The ball entry switching means is provided with a discharge means capable of discharging a ball existing in the predetermined space from the predetermined space in a state where the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state.
The ball entry switching means can be switched to the first state while the ball is present in the predetermined space.
The game ball existing in the predetermined space is configured to be visible,
The detection means is a means for imparting a predetermined value, and is configured to be capable of detecting all the balls that have passed through the entrance and flowed down the predetermined space after the flow of the predetermined space .
The gaming machine is configured so that all the balls that have passed through the entry port enter the predetermined space, and all the balls that have passed through the entry port are discharged from the predetermined space. A gaming machine characterized by being .

Images